42
Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Boiler Pump Controller Code: SS1139/DT007030-001 Version 1.00

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    5

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump ControllerTechnical Guide

Boiler Pump Controller Code SS1139DT007030-001 Version 100

Zone

Zone

BOILER PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION AAON PN

Boiler Pump Controller ASM02519Touch Screen Computer PPC V99840CommLink 5 ASM01874IP Module Kit ASM01902

EBC E-BUS Cable Assembly E-BUS Power amp Comm 15 Ft 3 Ft 10 Ft 25 Ft 50 Ft 75 Ft 100 Ft 150 Ft 250 Ft and 1000 Foot Spool

G029440 (15 Ft) G012870 (3 Ft) G029460 (10 Ft) G045270 (25 Ft) G029510 (50 Ft) G029530 (75 Ft) G029450 (100 Ft) G029470 (150 Ft) V36590 (250 Ft) G018870 (SPOOL)

E-BUS Adapter Hub with 15 Ft EBC Cable ASM01635 E-BUS Adapter Board ASM01878

QUALIFIED INSTALLER

IMPROPER INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENT ALTERATION SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MUST BE PERFORMED BY A TRAINED QUALIFIED INSTALLER A COPY OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE KEPT WITH THE UNIT AT ALL TIMES

WARNING

AAON2425 South Yukon AveTulsa OK 74107-2728wwwaaoncomFactory Technical Support Phone 918-382-6450It is the intent of AAON to provide accurate and current product information However in the interest of product improvement AAON reserves the right to change pricing specifications andor design of its product without notice obligation or liability

AAON PN G076280 Rev 01ACopyright October 2020 copy AAON All rights reserved throughout the worldAAONreg and AAONAIREreg are registered trademarks of AAON Inc Tulsa OKBACnetreg is a registered trademark of ASHRAE Inc Atlanta GAJavatrade is a registered trademark of Oracle IncAAONreg assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this documentThis document is subject to change without notice

wwwaaoncom

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Zone

Zone

OVERVIEW 4Control System Features amp Applications 4Manual Overview 4

MAIN BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 5Boiler Pump Operation Modes 5Mode of Operation 5Controlling the Operation Modes 5Off Mode 5Run Mode 5Safety Checks 6

INPUTS amp OUTPUTS 7Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs 7

INSTALLATION amp WIRING 8Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring 8Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring 9Boiler Connection Wiring 10Important Wiring Considerations 11Controller Electrical and Environmental Specifications 11

TROUBLESHOOTING 12Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics amp Locations 12Thermistor Temperature Sensor Testing 14Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart 15

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER LCD DISPLAY SCREENS 16

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg MSTP CONNECTION TO NETWORK amp BACnetreg PARAMETERS 23

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN OPERATOR INTERFACE MONITORING 29

Zone

ZoneOVERVIEW

4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Features amp Applications

Manual Overview

This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual

Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules

Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller

Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics

Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens

Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable

Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System

Control System Features amp Applications

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables

In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

5

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler

The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential

Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package

Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues

The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation

1 Off Mode

2 Run Mode

The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)

Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors

1 Remote Unit RunStop Input

2 Internal Schedule

3 RunStop override via BACnetreg

4 RunStop override via the User Interface

Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled

In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run

During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status

Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop

The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so

Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo

The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable

The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg

Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open

Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings

If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump

During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure

If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow

Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6

Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg

Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100

Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time

1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg

The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range

If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg

If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg

2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg

If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint

If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint

If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint

3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature

If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint

If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)

If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg

If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint

Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data

Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms

Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds

Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds

Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 2: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

BOILER PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM PART DESCRIPTION AAON PN

Boiler Pump Controller ASM02519Touch Screen Computer PPC V99840CommLink 5 ASM01874IP Module Kit ASM01902

EBC E-BUS Cable Assembly E-BUS Power amp Comm 15 Ft 3 Ft 10 Ft 25 Ft 50 Ft 75 Ft 100 Ft 150 Ft 250 Ft and 1000 Foot Spool

G029440 (15 Ft) G012870 (3 Ft) G029460 (10 Ft) G045270 (25 Ft) G029510 (50 Ft) G029530 (75 Ft) G029450 (100 Ft) G029470 (150 Ft) V36590 (250 Ft) G018870 (SPOOL)

E-BUS Adapter Hub with 15 Ft EBC Cable ASM01635 E-BUS Adapter Board ASM01878

QUALIFIED INSTALLER

IMPROPER INSTALLATION ADJUSTMENT ALTERATION SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE CAN CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE PERSONAL INJURY OR LOSS OF LIFE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MUST BE PERFORMED BY A TRAINED QUALIFIED INSTALLER A COPY OF THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE KEPT WITH THE UNIT AT ALL TIMES

WARNING

AAON2425 South Yukon AveTulsa OK 74107-2728wwwaaoncomFactory Technical Support Phone 918-382-6450It is the intent of AAON to provide accurate and current product information However in the interest of product improvement AAON reserves the right to change pricing specifications andor design of its product without notice obligation or liability

AAON PN G076280 Rev 01ACopyright October 2020 copy AAON All rights reserved throughout the worldAAONreg and AAONAIREreg are registered trademarks of AAON Inc Tulsa OKBACnetreg is a registered trademark of ASHRAE Inc Atlanta GAJavatrade is a registered trademark of Oracle IncAAONreg assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this documentThis document is subject to change without notice

wwwaaoncom

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Zone

Zone

OVERVIEW 4Control System Features amp Applications 4Manual Overview 4

MAIN BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 5Boiler Pump Operation Modes 5Mode of Operation 5Controlling the Operation Modes 5Off Mode 5Run Mode 5Safety Checks 6

INPUTS amp OUTPUTS 7Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs 7

INSTALLATION amp WIRING 8Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring 8Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring 9Boiler Connection Wiring 10Important Wiring Considerations 11Controller Electrical and Environmental Specifications 11

TROUBLESHOOTING 12Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics amp Locations 12Thermistor Temperature Sensor Testing 14Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart 15

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER LCD DISPLAY SCREENS 16

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg MSTP CONNECTION TO NETWORK amp BACnetreg PARAMETERS 23

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN OPERATOR INTERFACE MONITORING 29

Zone

ZoneOVERVIEW

4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Features amp Applications

Manual Overview

This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual

Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules

Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller

Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics

Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens

Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable

Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System

Control System Features amp Applications

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables

In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

5

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler

The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential

Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package

Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues

The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation

1 Off Mode

2 Run Mode

The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)

Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors

1 Remote Unit RunStop Input

2 Internal Schedule

3 RunStop override via BACnetreg

4 RunStop override via the User Interface

Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled

In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run

During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status

Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop

The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so

Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo

The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable

The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg

Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open

Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings

If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump

During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure

If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow

Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6

Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg

Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100

Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time

1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg

The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range

If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg

If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg

2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg

If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint

If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint

If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint

3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature

If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint

If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)

If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg

If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint

Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data

Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms

Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds

Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds

Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 3: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Zone

Zone

OVERVIEW 4Control System Features amp Applications 4Manual Overview 4

MAIN BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 5Boiler Pump Operation Modes 5Mode of Operation 5Controlling the Operation Modes 5Off Mode 5Run Mode 5Safety Checks 6

INPUTS amp OUTPUTS 7Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs 7

INSTALLATION amp WIRING 8Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring 8Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring 9Boiler Connection Wiring 10Important Wiring Considerations 11Controller Electrical and Environmental Specifications 11

TROUBLESHOOTING 12Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics amp Locations 12Thermistor Temperature Sensor Testing 14Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart 15

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLLER LCD DISPLAY SCREENS 16

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg MSTP CONNECTION TO NETWORK amp BACnetreg PARAMETERS 23

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN OPERATOR INTERFACE MONITORING 29

Zone

ZoneOVERVIEW

4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Features amp Applications

Manual Overview

This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual

Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules

Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller

Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics

Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens

Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable

Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System

Control System Features amp Applications

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables

In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

5

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler

The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential

Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package

Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues

The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation

1 Off Mode

2 Run Mode

The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)

Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors

1 Remote Unit RunStop Input

2 Internal Schedule

3 RunStop override via BACnetreg

4 RunStop override via the User Interface

Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled

In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run

During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status

Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop

The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so

Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo

The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable

The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg

Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open

Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings

If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump

During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure

If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow

Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6

Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg

Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100

Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time

1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg

The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range

If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg

If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg

2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg

If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint

If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint

If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint

3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature

If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint

If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)

If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg

If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint

Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data

Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms

Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds

Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds

Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 4: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

ZoneOVERVIEW

4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

Features amp Applications

Manual Overview

This guide will lead you through each section of the Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Below is a quick overview of each section of this manual

Section 1 Sequence of Operations - Page 5mdashThis section contains the sequence of operations for the Boiler Pump Controller and its modules

Section 2 IOs and Wiring - Page 7mdashThis section contains the inputs outputs and wiring for the controller

Section 3 Troubleshooting - Page 12mdashThis section contains sensor testing charts and controller LED diagnostics

Appendix A Controller LCD Display Screens - Page 16mdashThis appendix describes the controllerrsquos LCD screens

Appendix B BACnetreg Configuration - Page 23mdashThis section lists BACnetreg parameters definitions and ranges if applicable

Appendix C Touch Screen User Interface - Page 29mdashThis section gives a brief overview of the Touch Screen user interface for the Boiler Pump Control System

Control System Features amp Applications

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS expansion ports which allow for the connection of sensors via EBC E-BUS cables

In addition the Controller and its associated modules contain a 2 x 8 LCD character display with 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display and BACnetreg configuration

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

5

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler

The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential

Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package

Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues

The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation

1 Off Mode

2 Run Mode

The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)

Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors

1 Remote Unit RunStop Input

2 Internal Schedule

3 RunStop override via BACnetreg

4 RunStop override via the User Interface

Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled

In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run

During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status

Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop

The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so

Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo

The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable

The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg

Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open

Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings

If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump

During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure

If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow

Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6

Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg

Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100

Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time

1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg

The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range

If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg

If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg

2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg

If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint

If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint

If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint

3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature

If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint

If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)

If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg

If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint

Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data

Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms

Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds

Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds

Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 5: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

5

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Boiler Pump Controller OperationThe Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and provides enable signaling for the boiler

The controller can operate a single boiler package or multiple boilers It can also operate a variable speed pump (with or without a redundant pump) to maintain a designated building pressure differential

Optionally the controller can provide an analog output to the boiler and control the boiler out temperature The controller can communicate via Modbus with the boiler package for status information and can receive a fault indication from the boiler package

Mode of OperationThe boiler pump controller has a power up delay during which no control action can occur This is to allow all input readings to reach a stable state before operation continues

The boiler pump controller has only two normal modes of operation

1 Off Mode

2 Run Mode

The sequence is based primarily on ldquonormalrdquo operation with exten-sions to operation where exceptional conditions are present (safeties)

Controlling the Operation ModesThe two operation modes are commanded by a combination of 4 mode control factors

1 Remote Unit RunStop Input

2 Internal Schedule

3 RunStop override via BACnetreg

4 RunStop override via the User Interface

Off ModeDuring shut down mode the boiler enable output is disabled and then the pump enable outputs are disabled The bypass valve output is then disabled

In off mode the boiler will be disabled and the boiler pump will not run The bypass valve will remain closed until the system is called to run

During off mode no control actions will occur However the con-troller will continue monitoring pressure and GPM inputs for status

Run ModeRun mode consists of the boiler producing hot water and the pump pumping the resulting water through the building hot water loop

The Remote RunStop input on the controller must be activated for the pump to enable and run If it is not active the pump will not run regardless of other commands to do so

Once the Remote RunStop input is activated BACnetreg commands can be issued Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run will make the controller enter the run mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to stop will make the controller shut-down to off mode Issuing a BACnetreg command for the boiler pump to run automatically will make the controller refer to its internal schedule to determine operating mode The internal schedule by default is ldquorun alwaysrdquo

The BACnetreg default mode being automatic and the internal sched-ule of run always makes the Remote RunStop input act as a true runstop and not just an enable

The RunStop override in BACnetreg and RunStop override via the user interface (UI) affect the same single internal conditional vari-able meaning an override issued by BACnetreg can be canceled via the UI and an override condition issued by the UI can be canceled or altered via BACnetreg

Once the pump is activated to run the boiler will be enabled Initially the runtimes of the pumps will be compared and the pump with the least amount of run time will be allowed to run Its respective louver will be energized Once the louver has enough time to open (based on time delay) the less ran pump will be energized There will be a 10-second delay (adjustable 0-35 seconds) before the pump starts to allow the boiler isolation valve to open

Once the pump starts to run the pump will start its pump VFD output at the starting percentage It will hold at this pump starting percent-age for 30 seconds The controller will confirm that the water flow differential pressure increases by 5 PSI from the off mode readings

If water flow is not confirmed within 30 seconds the pump will be deactivated and locked out If there is a redundant pump pump action will be attempted with the redundant pump

During Run Mode the pump VFD output will be modulated to maintain the designated building differential pressure

If Bypass Valve Control is configured the controller will modulate a bypass valve output to maintain the minimum flow

Once the controller has established which pump has run the least amount and is allowing that pump to run After a week it will be tested again to see if the current running pump is indeed still the least run pump overall if it is not the controller will switch at that time and allow the other pump to come on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6

Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg

Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100

Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time

1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg

The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range

If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg

If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg

2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg

If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint

If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint

If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint

3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature

If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint

If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)

If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg

If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint

Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data

Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms

Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds

Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds

Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 6: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

ZoneSECTION 1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide6

Boiler Output TemperatureThe Boiler Pump Controller will modulate the boiler output to drive the boiler to control the Boiler Water Out Temperature The Boiler Output Setpoint Range set in the boiler is 80deg to 180deg There are (3) methods that can be used to reset the Boiler Output Temperature within that range With no reset the Boiler Output Temperature will be 80deg

Boiler LoadingmdashThe staging is accomplished through setpoints and when the boiler analog output reaches the max stage percent-age setpoint (default is 80) the controller will hold the analog output there for 40 seconds allowing the 2nd louver to make After the time has elapsed the boiler output will reset to 0 and return to modulating for temperature control After the 2nd boiler time delay (which is fixed) is expired the 2nd boiler will energize Both boilers can modulate together using the same boiler output until they reach max capacity of 100

Boiler UnloadingmdashOnce the controllerrsquos boiler output reaches the min stage percentage setpoint (default of 15) the controller will hold the boiler output at 15 for 40 seconds It will then reset the boiler output back to 100 and allow the first boiler to start to unload from there The 2nd boiler will shut off during this time

1 Writing to the Boiler Output Temperature Reset Point via BACnetreg

The boiler is looking for a percentage from 0-100 value written to this BACnetreg point to reset the output temperature over the 100deg temperature range

If you write a 50() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 130deg

If you write a 100() to the BACnetreg Boiler Output Temperature Reset point that will increase the boiler setpoint to 180deg

2 Using the Hard-Wired Boiler Reset Input This 0-10 VDC input will proportionally reset the Boiler Output Temperature between 80deg and 180deg

If you send at 1 VDC signal that will be interpreted as a 10 increase based on the 100deg reset range (10deg) So 10 would be added to the 80deg initial output temperature setpoint to produce a 90deg setpoint

If you send a 5 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 50 to produce a 130deg setpoint

If you send a 10 VDC signal that will be interpreted as 100 to produce a 180deg setpoint

3 Outdoor Air Temperature ResetIf this option is configured the Boiler Output Setpoint will be auto-matically reset between 80deg and a maximum of 130deg based on the outdoor temperature The outdoor air temperature range used for reset is 20deg to 70deg The reset amount equals 70deg minus the outdoor temperature That reset value would be added to 80deg to reset the Boiler Output Temperature

If the outside air is 50deg it will increase the setpoint by 20deg (70deg - 50deg) to a 100deg setpoint

If the outside air temperature was 70deg there would be no reset (70deg - 70deg = 0 reset)

If the Outdoor Air Temperature reset is used in conjunction with the hard-wired Boiler Reset Input then the Outdoor Air Temperature reset value would be added to the Boiler Output Temperature that has been established by the 0 - 10 VDC input signal up to a maximum Boiler Output Temperature of 180deg

If the hardwired Boiler Reset had produced a reset setpoint of 130deg (2 above) and if the outside air is 50deg then 20deg (70deg - 50deg) would be added to the 130deg setpoint to produce a 150deg setpoint

Safety ChecksSafeties represent operating conditions which may override or otherwise affect normal operation Several safeties exist to help stop continued operation when conditions which may harm the equipment are present Activation of safeties will typically trigger an alarm indication both in the Alarm Indicator output and within the BMS communications data

Manual Lockout ResetA manual lockout reset button is available from the Touch Screenrsquos Alarms Screen that will reset and retry all alarms

Boiler Fault 1If boiler 1 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Boiler Fault 2If boiler 2 is enabled and if the boiler out temperature does not rise 5 degrees within 5 minutes this alarm will trigger

Pump VFD Fault 1A Pump VFD Fault 1 will cause the boiler pump VFD 1 to shut down after 10 seconds

Pump VFD Fault 2If two pumps are configured and the 2nd pump is running a Pump VFD Fault 2 will cause the boiler to shut down the boiler pump 2 after 10 seconds

Pump Operation MonitoringThe Boiler Pressure In and Boiler Pressure Out will be monitored for a differential to determine if the pump is functioning This opera-tion requires a pressure setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run and the boiler differential is less than 5 PSI for more than 5 minutes

Boiler Pump Controller Operation

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 7: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

7

Boiler Pump Controller IO Map

InputOutput Maps

See Table 1 for the Boiler Pump Controller InputsOutputs

Boiler Pump Controller

Analog Inputs1 Boiler Water In Temperature (AI1)2 Boiler Water Out Temperature (AI2)3 Building Pump Suction Pressure (AI3)4 Building Pump Discharge Pressure (AI4)5 Boiler Reset Input (AI5)6 Flow Meter (AI6)7 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor (AI7)

Binary Inputs

1 Remote RunStop (BIN1)2 Water Flow Switch (BIN2)3 Safety Shutdown (BIN3)4 Phase Brownout (BIN4)5 Pump 1 VFD Fault (BIN5)6 Pump 2 VFD Fault (BIN6)

Relay Outputs (24 VAC)

1 Pump 1 Enable (RLY1)

2 Pump 2 Enable (RLY2)

3 Boiler Enable 1 (RLY3)

4 Alarm Indicator (RLY4)

5 Louver 1 (RLY5)

6 Boiler Enable 2 (RLY6)

7 Louver 2 (RLY7)

Analog Outputs

1 Pump VFD (AOUT1)

2 Boiler Output (AOUT2)

3 Bypass Valve (AOUT3)Communication Terminals

WATT COMM Communication Terminal BlockBACNET MSTP Communication Terminal Block

DUAL E-BUS 2 EBC E-BUS PortsAdditional Inputs

NOTE The following E-BUS sensor could be connected to the Main Boiler Pump Controller via E-BUS port or E-BUS adapter 1 E-BUS Horizontal Outdoor Air Temperature amp RH Sensor

Table 1 Boiler Pump Controller Inputs amp Outputs

Water Flow Input MonitoringIf the pump is running the Water Flow Input is monitored by veri-fying the pressure differential is above 5 PSI A lack of water flow exceeding a 30 second time span will cause the running pump to be shut down and locked out If a redundant pump is available opera-tion with that pump will be tried otherwise the boiler will be shut down and all operations will cease

High Temperature AlarmIf the Boiler Out Temperature reaches 200degF the boilers will be shut down

High Pressure AlarmIf the Boiler Out Pressure reaches 100 PSI the pumps will be locked out

Boiler Operation Monitoring The Boiler Water Temp In and Boiler Water Temp Out will be moni-tored for a differential to determine if the boiler is functioning This operation requires a Boiler Output Setpoint to be provided to the controller and alarming will only occur if the boiler is commanded to run the Water Temp In is more than 10degF below the setpoint and the boiler differential is less than 5degF for more than 5 minutes

Phase LossIf the Phase Brownout Signal goes inactive a Phase Brownout Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Safety ShutdownIf the Safety Shutdown Signal goes inactive a Safety Shutdown Alarm will be generated and the pumps and boiler will be shut down Upon re-activation the pumps and boilers will be allowed to come back on

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 8: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide8

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Figure 1 Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Input Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller operates a variable speed building pump used with a stand-alone boiler package and includes enable signaling for the boiler

The Controller is designed with 8 analog inputs 4 analog outputs 8 binary inputs and 8 relay outputs

The Controller has an on-board BACnetreg port for connection to a BACnetreg MSTP network There are also (2) E-BUS Expansion Ports which allow the connection of an EBC E-BUS adapter or board via EBC E-BUS cable assemblies

The Controller contains a 2 x 8 LCD character display and 4 buttons that allow for status and alarm display as well as BACnetreg

configuration

See Figure 1 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 9: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

9

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Figure 2 Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

Boiler Pump Controller Output Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source Please see Table 2 page 11 for correct VA requirements to use when sizing the transformer used for powering the Controller

Also please note that when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller its contacts must be wired as wet contacts (connected to 24 VAC)

See Figure 2 below for output wiring

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 10: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

ZoneSECTION 2 WIRING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide10

Boiler Connection Wiring

Figure 3 Boiler Connection Wiring

Boiler Connection Wiring

The Boiler Pump Controller connects to the Boiler using the E-BUS Adapter Board

The E-BUS Adapter Board connects to the Controllerrsquos EBC E-BUS port using an EBC E-BUS cable

The Boiler is then connected to one of the MSTP E-BUS connections on the E-BUS Adapter Board

The baud rate of the Boiler connection is 19200

See Figure 3 below for input wiring

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 11: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 2 WIRING

11

WARNING When using a single transformer to power more than one controller or expansion module the correct polarity must always be maintained be- tween the boards Failure to observe correct polarity will result in damage to the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

Please carefully read and apply the following information when wiring the Boiler Pump Controller and its associated modules

1 All wiring is to be in accordance with local and national electrical codes and specifications

2 All 24 VAC wiring must be connected so that all ground wires remain common Failure to follow this procedure can result in damage to the controller and connected devices

3 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC wiring should be 18 gauge

4 Minimum wire size for all sensors should be 24 gauge Some sensors require 2-conductor wire and some require 3-or 4-conductor wire

5 Minimum wire size for 24 VAC thermostat wiring should be 22 gauge

6 Be sure that all wiring connections are properly inserted and tightened into the terminal blocks Do not allow wire strands to stick out and touch adjoining terminals which could potentially cause a short circuit

7 When communication wiring is to be used to intercon- nect Boiler Pump Controllers together or to connect to other communication devices all wiring must be plenum-rated minimum 18-gauge 2-conductor twisted pair with shield AAON can supply communication wire that meets this specification and is color coded for the network or local loop Please consult your AAON distributor for information If desired Belden 82760 or equivalent wire may also be used

8 Before applying power to the Boiler Pump Controller be sure to recheck all wiring connections and terminations thoroughly

Important Wiring Considerations

GeneralCorrect wiring of the Boiler Pump Controller is the most important factor in the overall success of the controller installation process The Boiler Pump Controller is installed and wired at the AAON factory Some of the following information may not apply to your installation if it was pre-wired at the factory However if troubleshooting of the controller is required it is a good idea to be familiar with the system wiring

WiringThe Boiler Pump Controller must be connected to an 18-30 VAC power source of the proper size for the calculated VA load requirements All transformer sizing should be based on the VA rating listed in Table 2

Table 2 Boiler Pump Controller Electrical and Environmental Requirements

Con

trol

D

evic

e

Vol

tage

VA

Loa

d

Ope

rati

ng

Tem

pera

ture

Hum

idit

y (N

on-

Con

dens

ing)

Boiler Controller

18-30 VAC (25-15)

Class 215 10degF to

150degF0-95 RH

Inputs

Resistive Inputs require 10KΩ Type 3 Thermistor

24 VAC Inputs provide 47kΩ Load

Outputs Relay Outputs 1 Amp maximum per output

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 12: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide12

Boiler Pump Controller LEDsThe Boiler Pump Controller is equipped with LEDs that can be used to verify operation and perform troubleshooting There are LEDs for communication operation modes and diagnostic codes See Figure 4 page 13 for the LED locations The LEDs associated with these inputs and outputs allow you to see what is active without using a voltmeter The LEDs and their uses are as follows

Operation LEDs - Factory Troubleshooting

POWER - This green LED will light up to indicate that 24 VAC power has been applied to the controller

APP HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the application software is working properly

OS HB - This green LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate the operating system is working properly

WDOG - This green LED will light up and stay lit to indicate the operating system is working properly

Diagnostic LEDs

ALARM - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED It will light up and stay lit when there is an alarm present The type of alarm will display on the LCD display

STATUS 1 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED Under normal operation it should not be blinking If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 2 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

STATUS 2 - This red LED is a diagnostic blink code LED If the software is running this LED should blink at a rate of 1 blink every 10 seconds If the LED is blinking non-stop along with Status 1 LED the controller is resetting factory defaults or there is an output force mode active

Communication LEDs

EBUS - This yellow LED will blink to signal E-BUS communications

BACNET - This yellow LED will light up and blink continuously to indicate BACnetreg communications

Relay LEDsRLY1 - RLY7 - These green LEDs will light up when the relay is enabled and will stay lit as long as it is active

Binary Input LEDsBIN1 - This green LED will light up when the Remote RunStop contact is closed

BIN2 - This green LED will light up when the Water Flow Switch is open

BIN3 - This green LED will light up when the Safety Shutdown contact is closed

BIN4 - This green LED will light up when the Phase Brownout contact is closed

BIN5 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 1 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN6 - This green LED will light up when the Pump 2 VFD Fault contact is closed

BIN7 - This green LED will light up when the Boiler Fault contact is closed

Boiler Pump Controller LED Diagnostics

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 13: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

13

Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Figure 4 Boiler Pump Controller LED Locations

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 14: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

ZoneSECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide14

Thermistor Sensor Testing InstructionsUse the resistance column to check the thermistor sensor while disconnected from the controller (not powered)

Use the voltage column to check sensors while connected to powered controllers Read voltage with meter set on DC volts Place the ldquo-rdquo (minus) lead on GND terminal and the ldquo+rdquo (plus) lead on the sensor input terminal being investigated

If the voltage is above 488 VDC then the sensor or wiring is open If the voltage is less than 005 VDC then the sensor or wiring is shorted

Thermistor Sensor Testing

TemperatureResistance for Thermistor Sensors

The following sensor voltage and resistance table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor resistance to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the notes and instructions that appear after the chart when checking sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

-10 -2333 93333 451-5 -2055 80531 4450 -1777 69822 4375 -15 60552 42910 -1222 52500 4215 -944 45902 4120 -666 40147 4002

25 -388 35165 3891

30 -111 30805 377335 166 27140 365140 444 23874 352245 722 21094 33950 10 18655 325252 1111 17799 319954 1222 16956 314356 1333 16164 308758 1444 15385 302960 1555 14681 297262 1666 14014 291664 1777 13382 286166 1888 12758 280268 20 12191 274669 2055 11906 271770 2111 11652 269171 2166 11379 266172 2222 11136 263573 2277 10878 2605

Table 3 TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Temperature ndash Resistance ndash Voltage for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor SensorsTemp(ordmF)

Temp(ordmC)

Resistance(Ohms)

Voltage Input (VDC)

74 2333 10625 257675 2388 10398 254976 2444 10158 25277 25 10000 2578 2555 9711 246480 2666 9302 24182 2777 8893 235484 2888 8514 2386 30 8153 224688 3111 7805 219290 3222 7472 213995 35 6716 2009100 3777 6047 1884105 4055 5453 1765110 4333 4923 165115 4611 4449 154120 4888 4030 1436125 5166 3656 1339130 5444 3317 1246135 5722 3015 1159140 60 2743 1077145 6277 2502 1001150 6555 2288 0931

Table 3 cont TemperatureResistance for Type III 10K Ohm Thermistor Sensors

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 15: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Zone

Zone

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

SECTION 3 TROUBLESHOOTING

15

Pressure Transducer Pressure to Voltage Conversion

0-200 PSI Pressure Transducer - Pressure to Voltage Conversion Chart

The following sensor voltage and pressure table is provided to aid in checking sensors that appear to be operating incorrectly Many system operating problems can be traced to incorrect sensor wiring Be sure all sensors are wired per the wiring diagrams in this manual

If the sensors still do not appear to be operating or reading correctly check voltage andor pressure to confirm that the sensor is operating correctly per the table Please follow the instructions below when checking sensors

Use the voltage column to check the Suction Pressure Sensor or Discharge Pressure Sensor while connected to the Boiler Pump Controller The controller must be powered for this test Read voltage with a meter set on DC volts Place the positive lead from the meter on the analog input the sensor is connected to on the controllerrsquos terminal block Place the negative lead from the meter on any ground (GND) terminal located on the controller If the pressurevoltage readings do not align closely with the chart your Pressure Transducer is probably defective and will need to be replaced

0-200 PSIPressure Transducer

Pressure to Voltage Conversion

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

Pre

ssur

e

PS

I

Sig

nal

DC

Vol

ts

0 05 110 2710 07 120 2920 09 130 3130 11 140 3340 13 150 35

50 15 160 37

60 17 170 3970 19 180 41

80 21 190 43

90 23 200 45100 25

Table 4 PressureVoltage for 0-200 PSI Pressure Transducers

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 16: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide16

LCD Display Navigation Keys amp Editing Keys

LCD Display Screen amp Navigation amp Editing Keys

The LCD display screens and buttons allow you to view status and alarms enable force modes and make BACnetreg configuration changes See Figure 5 below and refer to Table 5 for Navigation Key functions The keys also have editing functions Refer to Table 6 for Editing Key functions

Figure 5 LCD Display and NavigationEditing Keys

Table 5 Navigation Key Functions

NAVIGATION

KEYKEY FUNCTION

MENU Use the MENU key to move through screens within Main Menu categories and return to the Main Menu while at other screens

UP

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

DOWN

Use this key to adjust setpoints and change configurations

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to navigate through the Main Menu Screen categories

Table 6 Editing Key Functions

EDITING

KEYFUNCTION

UP or

DOWN

Use the UP or DOWN key to enter editing mode on a user-adjustable screen Edit Mode is indicated by the underscore appearing on the screen

NOTE Entering Edit Mode will also adjust the value up one (UP key) or down one (DOWN key) so you may have to readjust the value

ENTER

Use the ENTER key to move through the digits in the screen when editing a numeric value An extended press of the ENTER key saves your edits no matter the location of the editing cursor within the digits

Press the ENTER key to save a non- numeric value - such as Hi Speed Network

MENU The MENU key cancels editing when in Edit Mode The screen you were editing will return to its original value and the under-score will disappear

A second press of the MENU key will return you to the Main Menu

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 17: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

17

Boiler Pump Controller Main Screens Map

Refer to the following map when navigating through the Boiler Pump Controller Screens The first screen is an initialization screen To scroll through the rest of the screens press the ltMENUgt button

BOILER1139VXXX

ALARMSSTATUS

Press to go to the System Status Screen

Press to scroll through the Alarms Status Screens

Press to return to the first Main Menu Screen

Main Screens Map

SYSTEMSTATUS

Press to scroll through the System Status Screens

Press to go to the Sensor Status Screen

SETPOINT MENU

Press to scroll through the Setpoint Menu Screens

Press to go to the Setpoint Menu Screen

SENSOR STATUS

Press to scroll through the Sensor Status Screens

Press to go to the Alarms Status Screen

Press to go to the System Settings Screen

Press to scroll through the System Settings Screens

SYSTEMSETTINGS

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 18: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide18

DEVICEID 15000

MSTP Baud 38400

BACnetreg - CURRENT BAUD RATE9600 19200 38400 57600 76800 Default is 38400

System Settings Screens

BACnetreg - CURRENT DEVICE IDA Device ID of up to 7 digits can be entered

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

System Settings Screens

Refer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Settings Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEM MODE

MAC Addr0 TO 127

BACnetreg - CURRENT MAC ADDRESSValid range is 0 to 127 Default is 0

The ltENTERgt key moves the cursor between the digit fields starting with the ones field Once the cursor is under a field use the ltUPgt amp

ltDOWNgt arrow keys to select a number between 0 and 9

Unit ID Addr 1-59

UNIT ADDRESSUnit address Valid range is 1-59 Default is 1

485-Baud HI SPEED

485 BAUD RATEHigh Speed or Low Speed Default is High Speed

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 19: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

19

System Status Screens

System Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the System Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SYSTEMSTATUS

MODEOFF or RUNNING

PUMP AO

PUMP ANALOG OUTPUTThis screen displays the pump analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential pressure is within the deadband of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential pressure is lower than the set-point - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential pressure is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

OPERATION MODEThis screen displays the current mode of operation Options are

bull OFF

bull RUNNING

BYPSS AO

BYPASS ANALOG OUTPUT

Louver or Made

BOILR AO

BOILER ANALOG OUTPUT

This screen displays the boiler analog output status Options are

bull HOLDINGmdash differential temperature is within the dead-band of the setpoint

bull LOADINGmdash differential temperature is lower than the setpoint - deadband

bull UNLOADINGmdash differential temperature is greater than setpoint + deadband

bull LOADEDmdash unit is at maximum capacity

bull UNLOADEDmdashunit is at minimum capacity

bull STAGE 2mdash the 2nd boiler sequence has been initiated

bull UNLOADS2mdashunit is at minimum capacity

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 20: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide20

Sensor Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the Screens From the Sensor Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SENSOR STATUS

BOIL IN XXXdegF

BOILER WATER IN TEMPERATURE or BOIL IN FAULTED

BOIL DIF XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL

BOILSETP XXXdegF

BOILER TEMPERATURE SETPOINT

PRS IN XXX PSI

BUILDING INLET PRESSURE or PRS IN FAULTED

Sensor Status Screens

PRS OUT XXX PSI

BUILDING OUTLET PRESSURE or PRS OUT FAULTED

PRS DIF XXX PSI

INTERNAL CALCULATION OF THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN BUILDING OUTLET AND INLET PRESSURE

PRS SET XXX PSI

BUILDING PRESSURE SETPOINT

GPM

GPM STATUS

GPM SET

GPM SETPOINT

RST VOLT

RESET VOLTAGE

BOIL OUT XXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT TEMPERATURE or BOIL OUT FAULTED

OA TEMP XXdegF

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE or OA TEMP FAULTED

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 21: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

21

Alarms Status ScreensIf there are no Alarms the Alarm Screen will display ldquoNo Alarmsrdquo If there are alarms present the screen will display ldquoAlarmsrdquo You can press ltENTERgt to scroll through the alarms or you can let the alarms automatically scroll on the screen

Alarms or No Alarms

Alarms Status Screens

NO ALARMSThis will be shown if there are no current alarms

ACTIVE ALARMSThis will display if there are active alarms

WatrFlow Loss Occurs if Water flow is open

Emergenc Loss Occurs if Emergency Shutdown input is open

PhaseLos Fail Occurs if Phase loss is open

Pump Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 1 VFD has a fault

HighTemp Fault Occurs if boiler out temperature rises above 200

Pump2Flt Loss Occurs if Pump 2 VFD has a fault

LDiffPrs Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 1 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

LDifPrs2 Fault Occurs if the differential pressure 2 is not greater than 5 psi for the time period of 5 min

BoilFlt1 Fault Occurs if boiler 1 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 1

BoilFlt2 Fault Occurs if boiler 2 has a fault If the boiler out temp does not change within 5 minutes from starting it will shut down boiler 2

ALARMSSTATUS

LDifTmp1 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

LDifTmp2 Fault Occurs if the Boiler out and Boiler in temperature differential is lower than 5 degrees for the time period of 5 minutes

HighPres Fault Occurs when high pressure occurs

BOIL IN FAULTED Occurs if the Boil In temperature sensor has failed

BOIL OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Boil Out temperature sensor has failed

PRS IN FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure In pressure sensor has failed

PRS OUT FAULTED Occurs if the Pressure Out pressure sensor has failed

OA TEMP FAULTED Occurs if the Outdoor Air sensor has failed

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 22: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX A - BOILER PUMP CONTROLER LCD SCREENS

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide22

Setpoint Status ScreensRefer to the following map when navigating through the screens From the Setpoint Status Screen press ltENTERgt to scroll through the screens

SETPOINTSTATUS

PRESSETP XXXPRESS

BUILDING PUMP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT

BYPSSETPXXXdegF

BYPASS SETPOINT

TEMPSETPXXXdegF

BOILER WATER OUT SETPOINT FOR THE BOILER

Setpoint Status Screens

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 23: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

23

BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

Figure 7 BACnetreg Connection to MSTP Network

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 24: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide24

BACnetreg Analog Inputs

BACnetreg Analog InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Point Name

AI 1 Application Software VersionAI 2 Entering Water TemperatureAI 3 Leaving Water TemperatureAI 4 Boiler ResetAI 5 Pump Discharge PressureAI 6 Pump Suction PressureAI 6 Pump Discharge PressureAI 7 Pump Differential PressureAI 8 Pump VFD SpeedAI 9 Boiler EnableAI 10 Boiler Outlet TemperatureAI 11 Boiler Inlet TemperatureAI 12 Boiler Firing RateAI 13 Boiler Status CodeAI 14 Boiler Blocking CodeAI 15 Boiler Lockout CodeAI 16 Boiler System Supply TemperatureAI 17 Boiler Outdoor TemperatureAI 18 Boiler Flue TemperatureAI 19 Boiler 2 EnableAI 20 Boiler 2 Outlet TemperatureAI 21 Boiler 2 Inlet TemperatureAI 22 Boiler 2 Firing RateAI 23 Boiler 2 Status CodeAI 24 Boiler 2 Blocking CodeAI 25 Boiler 2 Lockout CodeAI 26 Boiler 2 System Supply TemperatureAI 27 Boiler 2 Outdoor TemperatureAI 28 Boiler 2 Flue TemperatureAI 29 Boiler Analog OutputAI 30 Bypass Analog Output

Table 7 BACnetreg Analog Inputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 25: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

25

BACnetreg Analog Values

BACnetreg Analog Values Point Type Number BACnetreg Point Name Limit Range

MinMaxAV 1 Boiler Pressure Setpoint 0 100AV 2 Boiler Pressure Deadband 1 10AV 3 Bypass GPM Setpoint 0 999AV 4 Bypass GPM Deadband 1 100AV 5 Entering Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 6 Leaving Pressure Sensor Calibration -100 100AV 7 GPM Calibration -100 100AV 8 Reset Unit Lockout (1=Reset) 0 1AV 9 AutoRunOff Command 0 2AV 10 BACnet Boiler Demand 0 100AV 11 Pump Start Percentage 0 100AV 12 Pump Minimum 0 100AV 13 Boiler Start Percentage 0 100AV 14 Max Stage Percentage 0 100AV 15 Min Stage Percentage 0 100

Table 8 BACnetreg Analog Values

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 26: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide26

BACnetreg Binary InputsPoint Type Number BACnetreg Description Value Type

BI 1 Bad Boiler Water In AlarmBI 2 Bad Boiler Water Out AlarmBI 3 Bad Boiler Pressure In AlarmBI 4 Bad Boiler Pressure Out AlarmBI 5 RunStop Input Command StatusBI 6 Proof of Water Flow AlarmBI 7 Emergency Shutdown AlarmBI 8 Phase Loss AlarmBI 9 Pump VFD Fault AlarmBI 10 Pump VFD Fault 2 AlarmBI 11 Temp Not Changing Alarm AlarmBI 12 Temp Not Changing Alarm 2 AlarmBI 13 High Boiler Temperature Cutoff AlarmBI 14 Pressure Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 15 Temp Differential Low Alarm AlarmBI 16 Pressure Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 17 High Pressure Alarm AlarmBI 18 Temp Differential Low Alarm 2 AlarmBI 19 Pump 1 Binary Output 1 StatusBI 20 Pump 2 Binary Output 2 StatusBI 21 Boiler 1 Binary Output 3 StatusBI 22 Alarm Binary Output 4 StatusBI 23 Louver 1 Binary Output 5 StatusBI 24 Boiler 2 Binary Output 6 StatusBI 25 Louver 2 Binary Output 7 Status

Table 9 BACnetreg Parameter Binary Inputs amp Binary Outputs

BACnetreg Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 27: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

27

BACnetreg Multistate Input

BACnetreg Multi-State InputPoint Type Number Point Name BACnetreg Description Limits

MI 1 Operating Status Current Unit Mode 0 = OFF_MODE1 = RUN_MODE2 = Holiday OFF_MODE3 = Holiday RUN_MODE4 = Startup_Delay5 = Emergency Shutdown

Table 10 BACnetreg Parameter Multi-State Input

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 28: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX B - BACnetreg

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide28

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 29: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

29

Boiler Pump Controller Touch Screen Software Version 100 and up

Operator Interface Overview TS-X Touch Screen

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 30: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide30

Touch Screen Features

FeaturesThe main operator interface to the Boiler Pump Controller is a Panel PC (PPC) with a touch screen overlay The Boiler Pump Touch Screen interface contains a Javatrade-based software program that is displayed on a 15rdquo screen in the vestibule It provides a direct graphic-enhanced menu-driven link to allow the administrative level end user to view status points change setpoints and configurations and view alarms and reset alarm lockouts on the Boiler Pump system

The Touch Screen provides the following useful functions

bull Utilizes a graphical touch screen menu system with easy-to-understand menu options

bull Graphical screens provide easy setup and operation without the need for specialized training

bull Provides protection from unauthorized users through passcode authorization

bull Contains a USB port for software updates

Figure 1 Panel PC with Touch Screen Interface

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 31: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

31

System Overview Screen Help Screen amp Logging In

Start ScreenOnce the Boiler Pump Touch Screen program has been successfully installed the program will run continuously on your panel PC The System Overview Screen (view only) is the screen that will be displayed when you first access the program In View Only status you can view alarms and view status See Figure 2

At the top left of every screen in the program is the current time day of the week the month day and year At the bottom of every screen in the program is the ltHelpgt button on the left and the ltLoginLogoutgt button on the right The ltHelpgt button will take you to the Help Screen which contains the Controls Technical Support phone number and other information See Figure 3 Select ltExit Helpgt to exit the screen

Help Screen

Figure 2 System Overview Screen (View Only)

Figure 3 Main Help Screen

Logging In - Administrator Access

Figure 4 Login Screen

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen (Figure 2) press the ltLogingt button to access the Login Screen See Figure 4 Touch the User Name field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a username and press ltSubmitgt Touch the Passcode field and use the pop-up keyboard to enter a passcode and press ltSubmitgt Then at the Login Screen press ltSubmitgt again

WARNING The touch screen program does not time-out Make sure you logout when you leave in order to secure the system

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 32: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide32

System Overview Screen (Full Access)

After successful administrator login you will have full access to the Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen See Figure 5 below

Besides displaying the current operating status and inputs and outputs from this screen you can set schedules view alarms and reset lockouts and access and change setpoints and configurations These additional screens can be accessed using the icons located on the vertical toolbar at the right of the screenmdashltAlarmsgt ltDetailsgt ltSchedulesgt ltSetpointsgt and ltConfigurationgt

The bottom of the screen holds additional functionsmdashltHelpgt ltSystem Settingsgt ltUser Settingsgt ltAdmin Accessgt and ltLogoutgt

Securing the System

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU CHANGE THE ADMIN-ISTRATOR PASSCODE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE TO SECURE THE SYSTEM ALSO MAKE SURE TO LOG-OUT OF THE TOUCH SCREEN WHEN TASKS ARE COMPLETED IN ORDER TO SECURE THE SYSTEM

NOTE There are only two passcode levels in the Boiler Pump Touch Screen programmdashView only (no passcode) and Administrator Access Only the Administrator access can change passcodes There is also a limit to (1) Administrator per controls system

Figure 5 Boiler Pump Controller Main Status Screen (Administrator Access)

System Overview Screen (Full Access) amp Securing the System

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 33: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

33

Changing the Administrator Passcode

Figure 6 Manage Users Screen

The New Passcode Screen will appear See Figure 7 Enter the new passcode in the Passcode field and then again in the Confirm field or choose ltGenerate Random Passcodegt Please pay attention to the passcode requirements listed on the screen

WARNING MAKE SURE YOU RECORD THE NEW PASSCODE BY WRITING IT DOWN OR TEXTING IT INTO YOUR PHONE BEFORE YOU PRESS ltCHANGE PASSCODEgt

Figure 7 New Passcode Screen

Figure 8 Successful Passcode Change

If the passcodes donrsquot match or donrsquot meet the requirements a message will appear informing you what is wrong with the passcodemdashfor example the passcodes do not match or the passcode requires 1 lower case letter

If the passcode change is successful the Manage Users Screen will now appear again and the last date changed will show the date and time you changed the passcode and it should match the current date and time See Figure 8

Press ltExit User Settingsgt at the bottom of the display to return to the Main Screen See Figure 9

Figure 9 Main Screen - Tap to Start

Changing the Administrator Passcode

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltUser Settingsgt The Manage Users Screen will appear See Figure 6 Touch the Administrator username and passcode entry on the screen to highlight it and then touch ltChange Passcodegt

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 34: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide34

Navigation Configuration and Administrative Access Icons

Icons and Button Functions

Table 3 Administrator Icons amp Functions

ICON ADMINISTRATIVE ACCESS ICONS

When bright yellow the ltAlarmsgt icon takes you to the Alarms Screen and displays active alarms When greyed out no active alarms are present

The ltDetailsgt icon takes you to the Details Screen for Boiler Pump Status

The ltSchedulesgt icon takes you to the Schedules Screen amp Holidays Screen These screens allow you to set the desired schedule for the controller schedule overrides and schedule holidays

The ltSetpointsgt icon takes you to the Setpoint Screens for Pressure amp Temperature

The ltConfigurationgt icon takes you to the System Configuration Screens for the Boiler Pump Controller

NavigationThere are several ways to navigate the touch screen program One is to use your finger to swipe up and down or left and right to move from screen to screen Another is to touch the named buttons on the screenmdashwhatever those might be And yet another is to follow the directions on the screenmdashfor example ldquoSwipe up to see morerdquo See Table 1 for a list of Navigation buttons and their functions

Button Function

No Button

Use your finger to swipe the screen up or down or left to right to move from screen to screen

Use the ltBackgt button to exit the screen without saving changes This will return you to the previous screen

The gt symbol located on the left-hand side toolbar of a screen means you can swipe right to return to the previous screen until you reach the main screen

Table 2 Configuration Buttons

Configuration ButtonsSee Table 2 for a list of Configuration buttons and their functions

Button Function

The ltSubmitgt button is used throughout the program to save a setting or value This includes ltSubmit Changesgt and ltSubmit Searchgt The program verifies the input and returns to the previous screen

Use the ltSavegt button to save your changes and return to the previous screen

Touch the ltTogglegt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Red is OffNo

Touch the ltRadiogt button to turn it on and off Green is OnYes and Gray is OffNo The radio button is grouped with other radio buttons so that only one radio button can be chosen OnYes in the group

Table 1 Navigation Buttons

Administrative Access IconsSystem settings and screens are easily accessible by simply touching one of the five icons found on the right side of the System Overview Screen The subscreens contain data entry boxes with accessible number keyboards for data entry and screen maneuvering buttons such as ltBackgt ltSubmitgt and ltDonegt

There are 5 main Administrative Access icons See Table 3 for a list of these icons and their functions

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 35: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

35

System Settings

System Settings

At the bottom of the System Overview Screen touch ltSystem Settingsgt The System Settings Screen will appear See Figure 10 The screen contains these functionsmdashltComm Settingsgt ltSearch for Unitsgt ltManage Unitsgt ltPolling Unitsgt ltProgram Controllergt ltProgram Modulegt ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt and ltExit Programgt

Figure 10 System Settings Screen

System Settings Buttons and Functions Refer to Table 4 below for a description of the System Settings buttons and functions

BUTTON SYSTEM SETTINGSThe ltComm Settingsgt function is for setting up communication to the Boiler Pump Controller This communication can be through a serial con-nection on the local loop or through an Ethernet connection using a CommLink The way you know that Communication has been established is by performing a Search for Units

Once Communication has been established the ltSearch for Unitsgt function is used to search for Unit Controllers on the loop or loops

The ltManage Unitsgt function is used to change names andor descriptions of Loops and Units if desired

The ltPolling Unitsgt function shows the unit controllers in queue and the parameter blocks It also allows you to Disable Polling

The ltProgram Controllergt function allows you to update the software in a unit controller using the USB port on the Panel PC

The ltProgram Modulegt function is not used for this application

The ltBroadcast Time to Controllersgt function allows you to broadcast the current time and date to all controllers It is also used for test-ing purposes

The ltExit Programgt function will completely close the software application from the Touch Screen This should only be performed when told to do so by a Controls Support Technician

WARNING EXIT PROGRAM IS TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTREME CIRCUMSTANCES TO COMPLETELY CLOSE THE PROGRAM SUCH AS WHEN THE PRO-GRAM NEEDS TO BE RESTARTED

Table 4 System Settings Buttons amp Functions

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 36: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Setting Schedules

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSchedulesgt icon The Scheduling Screen will appear See Figure 11

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide36

Figure 11 Scheduling Screen

The Controller has two event start and stop times per day and two event start and stop times for holidays The holiday start and stop times will override the standard operating hours

You can set schedules by individual days or by selecting ltApply Mon - Fri Schedulegt or ltApply Full Week Schedulegt When you touch any of the fields or these selections the Time Selection Screen will appear See Figure 12 Touch the ltSet Timegt button in the middle of the screen

Schedules amp Overrides

Scheduling Overrides

Also from the Scheduling Screen you can override the schedule mode of operations See Figure 14

You can choose Auto Scheduling Force Schedule ON or Force Schedule OFF

A scheduled force override will remain in effect until cancelled To cancel an override select the Auto Scheduling option

Figure 12 Time Selection Screen

When you enter a time in any field you must designate AM or PM You can also select ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will automatically set the times for you You must toggle each event on in order to set the time for each event

You can also copy a schedule from a previous day andor copy a schedule to the next day When you are finished choose ltAcceptgt

Figure 13 Set Time Screen - Individual Days

Figure 14 Scheduling Overrides

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 37: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Setting Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen see Figure 11 page 34 swipe up to access the Holidays Screen See Figure 15

Figure 15 Holidays Screen

Holidays and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

Figure 16 Holiday Set Time Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

37

In the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) touch a date in the month to high-light it green and tag it as a holiday Days selected as holidays are indicated with a green background and white text

There are 14 holiday periods available for each year These holiday periods can span a single day or they can span weeks or even months

If your job-site has days during the year when you need to override the standard operating hours to accommodate holidays or other special events you can use this window to select the holidays

You cannot program holidays for the next year and holidays do not automatically adjust for the new year so you will need to access this screen after the new year and make necessary adjustments to the days that float such as Memorial Day

From this screen you can select 14 holiday periods per year You can also schedule the Holiday time schedule by selecting ltFull Day Occupiedgt or ltFull Day Unoccupiedgt which will take you to the Holiday Set Time Screen See Figure 16

Saving and Restoring Schedules amp Holidays

While at the Scheduling Screen (Figure 11 page 34) select ltSavegt to save the Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltLoadgt to restore a previously saved schedule or to copy or transfer a schedule from another Controller Select ltCleargt to completely erase the schedule appearing in the window

WARNING ltCleargt will clear ALL entered stopstart times so use with caution

While at the Holidays Screen (Figure 15) select ltSavegt to save the Holidays Select ltLoadgt to restore previously saved Holidays or to copy or transfer Holidays from another Controllerrsquos schedule Select ltClear Allgt to completely erase the holidays appearing in the window Saving all schedules andor holidays from the controller to a file on your computer for use in restoring the schedules andor holidays for copying to another specific controller will save time in configuring your controller and save valuable time in having to reenter schedules andor holidays for another controller

Saving holidays will also make it easier to enter the holidays for the next calendar year when it arrives

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 38: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide38

Figure 19 Pressure Temperature amp Water Flow Setpoints Screen

Figure 18 Pressure amp Temperature Setpoints Screen

Setpoint Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltSetpointsgt icon The Setpoints Screen will appear There is one setpoint screen that will include Pressure and Temperature setpoints and may also include Water Flow setpoints if configured

See Figures 18 amp19 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Details Screen amp Setpoints Screen

Figure 17 Details Screen

Details Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltDetailsgt icon The Details Screen will appear See Figure 17 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 39: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

39

Configuration Settings Screen amp Changing SetpointsConfigurations

Figure 20 System Configuration Main Screen

Configuration Settings Screen

To the right of the Administrator Access level System Overview Screen touch the ltConfigurationgt icon The System Configuration Main Screen will appear See Figure 20 Touch the gt symbol on the left to return to the System Overview Screen

To change a value for a configuration or setpoint touch the blue data field next to the configuration or setpoint The Keypad Data Entry Screen will appear See Figure 21 Each editable configuration or setpoint has its own data entry screen containing the name of the configuration or setpoint a brief description of the configuration or setpoint and the valid range for the configuration or setpoint

Enter a new value that is within the allowable range in the blue data entry field above the keypad

Select ltSubmitgt to have the system accept the new value If you enter a setpoint that is not in the valid range the setpoint will remain as is and will not change

Select ltBackgt to return to the previous screen without saving your entry

The Configuration Settings Screens also utilize radio buttons and toggle keys Use the radio button next to a configuration to turn the configuration on or offmdashgrey is off green is on Use the toggle key next to each configuration setpoint to turn the configuration on or offmdashred is off green is on

Figure 21 Keypad Data Entry Screen

Changing Configuration amp Setpoint Values

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 40: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide40

Viewing Alarm Status

To access the Alarms Screen from the System Overview Screen touch the ltAlarmsgt icon This icon will be a dull grey when no active alarms exist and will be a bright yellow when active alarms exist

There are two views for the Alarms Screenmdashview only and administrative access

Alarms Screen

Figure 22 Alarms Screen (Administrative Access)

The Alarms Log for View Only Status shows the alarm category alarm description and number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen

The Alarms Screen for Administrative Access shows the alarm category alarm description number of active alarms at the bottom center of the screen and has buttons at the bottom to allow the administrator to reset lockouts Touch the ltManual Reset Lockoutgt button at the bottom of the screen to immediately reset an alarm once it has cleared See Figure 22

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 41: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide

APPENDIX C - TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE

41

Troubleshooting

Touch Screen Troubleshooting

Updating the Touch Screen

bull First download the latest software given to you by your AAON representative The software file is named BoilerJFX-xxxzip where xxx stands for the version number

bull Second extract the contents of the compressed file to the Boiler folder located on the Panel PCrsquos hard drive Confirm to replace the old versions of BoilerJFXjar and Versiontxt with the new files

Communication Lost - No Comm

bull Verify that the Main Controller is powered on and is firmly connected to the Touch Screen with the communications cable

bull Verify that the CommLink 5 is powered on and connected to your Touch Screen with the Ethernet cable

Sync Clock

bull In the event of the Main Controller being powered down for a long time (week or longer) it will lose its time and date Once you cycle power to the Main Controller the touch screen will display the correct time and date

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012

Page 42: Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide · 2020. 10. 13. · Zone Zone OVERVIEW 4 Boiler Pump Controller Technical Guide Features & Applications Manual Overview This guide will lead

2425 So Yukon Ave bull Tulsa OK bull 74107-2728Ph (918) 583-2266 bull Fax (918) 583-6094

AAONreg PN G076280 Rev 01APrinted in the USA bull copy October 2020 AAON bull All Rights Reserved

AAON Factory Technical Support 918-382-6450techsupportaaoncom

AAON Controls Support 866-918-1100 Monday through Friday 700 AM to 500 PM

Central Standard Time

NOTE Before calling Technical Support please have the model and serial number of the unit available

PARTS For replacement parts please contact your local AAON Representative

Boiler Pump Controller Technical GuideG076280 Rev 01A 201012